JP6894164B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that plays a game using a gaming medium.

A pachinko machine, which is an example of a game machine, has a game area provided on a game panel, and when a player hits a game ball into the game area and wins a prize in a general winning opening or the like in the process of the game ball flowing down. A predetermined number of gaming balls are released to the player as a prize for the winning, and when the gaming balls finish flowing down without winning, the gaming balls enter the out-ball opening and are collected on the playing field side.

The configuration of the game panel varies depending on the content of the game, but in recent years, a large center member (general) having at least an effect area such as an image display inside an enclosure that can prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area. Many of them have a "center accessory") (see Patent Document 1).

In addition, there are game panels made of veneer board and transparent synthetic resin, and those made of veneer board have synthetic resin cells with decoration (pattern) for the background attached to the surface. (See Patent Document 2).

JP-A-2007-252629 Jikkai Sho 61-109583

As described above, visual although devised to increase interest for games have been made Satoshimen, there no small voice desire still visual surface gaming machine devised has been subjected.

The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with a visual device.

The present invention for achieving the above object, Center member is attached to the gaming panel, a game machine for performing those Rika whether the lottery based on it has been run through a predetermined winning opening, said center member Is a section that divides a game area in which the game medium can be rolled and a non-game area in which the game medium cannot be rolled, a stage shelf that allows the game medium to fall toward the predetermined winning opening, and the section. A specific portion extending from the portion toward the non-gaming area is provided, and the surface of the game panel and the surface of the specific portion are formed substantially flush with each other. The design of the game panel and the design of the specific portion are considered to be a unified design, and a back side decorative member having a predetermined decoration is provided on the back side of the game panel, and the predetermined design is provided. The decoration is visible through a game area in which the game medium can roll, and a movable body that can move from the first position to the second position is provided, and the movable body is the first position. Even if it moves from to the second position, it is designed so that it does not overlap with the substantially flush and uniform design, and it is separate from the stage shelf and the game is played inside the outer circumference of the center member. It is characterized in that there is a flow path through which the medium can roll, and the design of the back surface of the flow path, which is made invisible by the gaming medium that has entered the flow path, is also designed to have the same uniformity. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a visual device.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It shows another form, and is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. FIG. 36B (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 37A including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line nullification member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member, and (b) is a sectional plan view of the foul cover unit. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) and (b) are an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 37G showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 37G showing a state in which an illegal ball is prevented from reversing. .. It is a top view of the foul cover unit. It is a top view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 37K, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the foul ball passes. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A) and (b) show the state in which the operation line invalidation member is electrified, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing the state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a central vertical sectional view of a game board including a partially enlarged view. It is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 105 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 indicated by an arrow. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. It is an enlarged view of the Z3 part of FIG. 108. It is an end face front view of the game board which cut the middle in the thickness direction of a light guide plate. It is the front view which disassembled and arranged with the front view of the game panel and the center member which omitted the back decoration member. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the base panel and the front enclosure member of a game panel. It is a perspective view which shows the base panel and the back decoration member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the base panel and the back decorative member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the production support frame and the drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the rear cover of an effect unit. It is a central vertical sectional view of the main part explaining the moving state of a drum.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
An example of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 102, and the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 103 to 120. For convenience of explanation, the side of the pachinko machine facing the player is referred to as "front" or "front", and the opposite side is referred to as "rear" or "back".

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIGS. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 supports a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The main body frame 4 which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. The control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be attached to. The back unit 3000 is provided with a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or a movable effect is performed by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emitting effect.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the player rotates the handle 182 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, which will be described later, the ball launching device 540 launches the game balls with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. It is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received by the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened for balls by the payout device 580 described later according to the received winning openings. Is paid out to the upper plate 201.

If the strength of the game ball that cannot reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, that is, the game ball launched with a weak firing force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. 10A, FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, the ball falls into the foul ball drop port 1013 provided between the end (end) of the launch rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, which is returned later. It is received by the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first discharged to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the outlet 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and the game can be played between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezium shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4.
Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 with a weak firing force and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, and at the same time. This is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting guide path 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a (a state of staying in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). The state) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. There is. Here, disabling the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting or pinching (pinching and stopping), entwining (winding), or adhering with hot melt or the like. It means to put it in a state.

The operation line nullification member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. Inclined portions 703 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the portions 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidation member 700 is bent so that the right end in the front view projects rearward with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same surface as the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700. As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

When the operation line invalidation member 700 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is formed in the ball striking supply port 142a. It will be in a state of communication with.

According to the operation line invalidation member 700, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having almost the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and is projected to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as causing the illegal ball to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the ball launching device 540 plays a game. The operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the fraudulent ball launched (struck) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Then, it can be cut like scissors by the narrowed part of the shearing part 700v formed by the first piece part 701 and the second piece part 702, and thus the operation line is invalidated and the illegal ball is used. It is possible to deter the fraudulent activity that has occurred.
The first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraudulent activity, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above, or the bent operation line nullifying member 700 may be formed. It may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.
When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the standby position (on the partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is of a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). By detecting with a sensor and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the firing of an illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36A and 36B. 36A (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36A (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 36B (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 36B (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is launched by the ball launching device 540 with a force weaker than a predetermined force (launching force that can reach the game area 5a) (launching force that cannot reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is launched. The purpose is to guide the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside to the lower plate 202, and to guide the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. ..
As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.
The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is possible to communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a that communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the penetrating ball passage 150a in the front view. It is equipped with a full tank ball receiving port 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and although it is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, the momentum is insufficient. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a foul ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop port 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and a front view right. The game ball B, which is open forward near the lower corner and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball discharge port 150d, and a communication passage 150h connecting the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. The connecting passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i arranged below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately 1 game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. It consists of a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel at intervals of one piece, the starting end opens upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ending portion is a storage passage 150e. It opens downward with respect to.
A series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the connecting passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned. It is a passage, and the return passage portion 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud caused by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and is also provided with the launch rail 544 and the outside. The foul ball drop port 1013 established between the rails 1001 is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as a third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, which is enlarged in FIG. 37B. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the cover member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 cover and accommodate the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.
The specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece portion 701 of FIG. 35. The first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 open in the direction facing the flow direction of the ball in the connecting passage 150h. A V-shaped shearing portion 7000v is formed.
In the foul cover unit 150 of the present embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37B, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 constitutes the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is directed toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A tapered guide portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width required for the game ball to flow down the upper surface thereof, and is directed toward the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width narrows toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side and the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second inclined portion 150 kb having a narrowed tip shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a tapered guide portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, slides into the guide portion 150k in a winding shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to become the first. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 by sliding the second inclined portion 150 kb. As a result, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul ball and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In addition, in order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150 ka and the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guide portion 150 k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is provided by using the space communicating from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is allowed to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L protruding from the lower plate ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or to be illegal. It is possible to deter fraudulent acts such as moving the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.
For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the fraudulent ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate, causing it to flow backward, and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). When "A") is performed, when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and heads for the launch position of the launch rail 544, Pulled by it (tension is applied), the operation line L wraps around in a U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally cuts. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated, so that it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the foul ball is intentionally made into a foul ball to be a foul ball, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (tension is applied) by the subsequent firing of the illegal ball Q and is operated. L is pressed against the folded-back portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. It will be possible. It should be noted that FIGS. 37A and 37B are explanatory views assuming a case where a fraudulent act B is performed. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, it becomes a foul ball). Even if the fraud ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention means. It also has an effect. Therefore, when targeting fraudulent activity B, the operation line nullifying member 700, 7000, which is the first and second fraud prevention means, and the operation line nullifying member 7000H, which is the third fraud prevention means described later. , 7000S is preferably used in combination as appropriate, and one unit of the first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or the third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. It is advisable to install it together with the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, so that they are inconspicuous, and therefore ball clogging or the like Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble of, it is difficult for fraud countermeasure information to be leaked. Further, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 are affected by the decrease in sharpness and the like, the crime prevention performance can be easily maintained by replacing the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 together with the door frame 3.

By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v to invalidate the operation line L, but sandwich the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022, and the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled or is difficult to push or pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. It may be invalidated as follows.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 37C and 37D, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by the shaded portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 37C, and the metal plates 7011, The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as a holding portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 is made so that it is difficult to contact the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And it is covered and accommodated from the outside by the lid member 152.
According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37D, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When wrapping around the folded-back portion in a U-turn shape, the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 are guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded-back portion, and the holding portion in the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.
As a result, the fraudulent ball Q that has flowed back from the lower plate ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act A reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the fraudulent ball Q that is intentionally made into a foul ball by the fraudulent act B. It becomes possible to suppress the arrival of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidation member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of extension of the operation line L cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.
In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tips of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as a holding portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the tip portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). The sandwiching width portion of both plate surfaces may be the sandwiching portion 7044. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrent effect.

Further, although not shown, the operation line invalidation member 7000 that sandwiches the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 37D, or is filled with an adhesive having a property of not hardening. Then, the adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is changed from the above-mentioned one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 37E, and this coil spring is replaced with a coil spring. It may be formed by installing so that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and its own central axis are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and is sandwiched.
The coil spring has a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as a tension coil spring or a torsion coil spring, but it is necessary to install the coil spring in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. Compared to this, it is advantageous in terms of installation work.
Further, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. 37E, the coil spring is installed by being curved in a direction in which the coils on the approach side of the operation line L are slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly.
When the operation line nullification member 7000 is formed of the coil spring in this way, it can be manufactured at low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidation member 7000 from the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000. Further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in the above-mentioned form, in order to deal with this, the course change part of the return passage part 1014 of the foul ball (in this form, the part corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) is A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent further illicit work in which a foreign object is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k. As a countermeasure against illegal work in which a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted as in the slit 1015 described above. Not limited to the one that forms the intake port, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 37A, a configuration in which a protruding obstacle portion 1016 is provided to prevent foreign matter such as a cell plate from colliding with the guide portion 150k. As a result, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operation line L and invalidates the members. As shown in FIGS. 37N and 37P, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

37K, 37L, and 37M show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). It is swingably attached to the course change portion (corner portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c).

That is, in FIG. 37K, the operation line invalidation member 7000D has a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped invalidating portion 2646 projecting vertically to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion. It has a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the 2645 and the invalidation portion 2646 intersect, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 projecting to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646. The support shaft 2649 planted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated by about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 37L (a). It can swing to the release posture of b). Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2650 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646 sandwiching the shaft hole 2647, and the ball receiving portion is urged by the balance weight 2650. The ball receiving posture shown in FIG. 37L (a) is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) acts on the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When acted, it swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b).
Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014), and is an operation line. When the invalidating member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b), the intersection side portion 2651 is fitted into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 37L (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward at the course changing section, the ball is placed on the ball receiving section 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is released to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the foul ball urges the balance weight 2650. It returns to the original ball receiving posture.
In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the first foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the latter foul ball is as shown in FIG. 37L (b). It is stopped by an arc-shaped ball stop 2648, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is reactivated before being continuously processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

Next, the foul cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D is connected to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is launched from the ball hitting supply port 142a. By intentionally firing the illegal ball weakly, it is made into a foul ball and taken out from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball, and further, the operation line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped and the subsequent illegal ball is performed. When the fraudulent ball Q (a fraudulent act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the fraudulent ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. 37M (a), and the course is changed downward at the course change section. Immediately after the change, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37M (b). At this time, the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the end edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side, but the intersection side portion 2651 When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the passage naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. 37M (b) and cannot move. (Pinch). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.
If the operation line L is meandered between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult for the operation line L to reverse, it is in a state of being captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hit ball supply port 142a side. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a evidence ball.

The above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by an electric drive means as shown in FIG. 37N. May be good.
That is, in the operation line invalidation member 7000D of FIG. 37N, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 as an electric drive means is connected to the portion provided with the balance weight 2650, and the ball detector is connected to the invalidation unit 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and it is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line invalidating member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving unit 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence of the game ball to the absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered to operate the operation line. The nullifying member 7000D is adapted to return from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.
When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball is detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives the change. In order to operate appropriately, foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line nullification member 7000D using its own weight.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646 as described above, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the emission signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the ascending position. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, fraudulent ball Q can be prevented.

The dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the present embodiment has a function of preventing the illegal ball Q from entering from the opening side of the ball while the ball receiving portion 2645 is blocking the return passage portion 104, the illegal ball described later will be described. It can also be used as a measure to prevent reverse movement. Therefore, it exhibits a higher fraud prevention function.
In addition to the above configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D is formed with, for example, a shutter plate structure in which the invalidation portion linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate Is a crossing side that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the crossing side, and the movable area of the crossing side is set. The illegal ball Q after passing is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidation unit, so that the operation line L is pinched or cut at the intersection crossing the connecting passage 150h. You may.
Further, the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidation member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be surely enhanced.

Further, FIG. 37P is a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, which winds up and invalidates the operation line L.
That is, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a square ring-shaped invalidation portion 2646 mounted in the connecting passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate about a rotation shaft 2656 in a direction orthogonal to the passage. The motor 2657, which is an electric drive means for rotating the invalidation portion 2646, and the horizontal bar crossing the connecting passage 150h of the invalidation portion 2646 are used as the intersection side portion 2651, and are downstream from the movable (rotation) region of the intersection side portion 2651. The ball detector 2655 is provided in the above, and the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655.
When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the connecting passage 150h and passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. The foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the ball opening, although the invalidation unit 2646 idles once when it is detected by the vessel 2655.
On the other hand, when the fraudulent ball Q due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the fraudulent ball Q goes under the invalidation unit 2646. In order to pass through the conversion unit 2646, when the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L winds around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q stops within the connecting passage 150h, there is no risk of it falling into the hands of a fraudulent person.
The ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q, and in such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidation member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

As described above, the description of the dynamic operation line nullification member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where you play with a game ball, and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball,
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage that communicates with the game area from the launch position of the ball launcher.
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop port opened in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside in front of the machine.
Equipped with fraud prevention means that can prevent the operation of the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from the front of the machine.
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that clamps, cuts, or winds the operation line to invalidate it.
The operation line nullification member includes an intersection side portion of the game ball that crosses the foul ball return passage, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball has passed through the movable region of the intersection side portion to operate the foul ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is designed to cross a return passage, and thus the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the intersection to invalidate the operation line. "

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B, 37A, 37I, and 37J, the third fraud prevention means provided at the foul ball drop port 1013 is the end (termination) of the launch rail 544. The operation line invalidation member 7000H provided on the part) and the operation line invalidation member 7000S provided on the end portion (specifically, the resin rail base 1001x) of the outer rail 1001.

The operation line nullification member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is combed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. It is covered with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.
Therefore, as described above, an illegal act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the return passage portion 1014 using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause the illegal ball Q to flow backward and send it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the launch rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the launch position, it is pulled by it (tension is applied) and the operation line L becomes the operation line invalidation member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the foul ball is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. Even when a fraudulent act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is used. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10A, 37A and 37I. It's a rush.
According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower plate ball supply port which is an opening for a ball. Even if an illegal person is grasping through the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension between the wires of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. After that, even if the force of the hand operating the operation line L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is hard to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, as a result, fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q can be suppressed.

As described above, as the third fraud prevention means, the operation line nullification member 7000H on the launch rail 544 side is effective at the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullification member 7000S on the side exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.
Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and 7000S alone, and both the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The forms may be exchanged with each other, or the same invalidating member may be adopted.
Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts as in this embodiment and attached to the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001, for example, the metal plate constituting the launch rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The chemical member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire rod is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a V groove is formed at a corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The shape of the pinching portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operation line L may be attracted to the depth of the groove of the pinching portion 7000Sv to be pinched.
Furthermore, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIG. 37J, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described with reference to FIGS. 37C and 37D. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 may be provided with a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150 ka and a second inclined portion 150 kb.

As described above, regarding the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is also provided as a foul ball. Although the form provided in the drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above form, of course.
For example, in the above embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. An invalidating member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the connecting passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 37A), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 36B (a), or is an outer rail constituting the foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a part where the operation line L abuts on a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at the start end of 1001 and the end of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is illegal with the weight of the illegal ball Q or the like. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it tries to be stretched straight by receiving a tension due to a pulling force by a person. The operation line invalidation member 7000 of the present embodiment is installed at a position where the player cannot touch the ball even if the player inserts a fingertip through the opening for the ball, and this position is the safety aspect of the player and the operation line is invalid. It is preferable in consideration of the crime prevention aspect that makes it difficult to illegally work on the chemical member 7000 itself.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided so as to be offset to one side of the connecting passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to fill the passage width. The cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the starting end portion of the connecting passage 150h are made into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. It is designed not to touch. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000 uses a well-known folding blade structure or a chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and with the unit main body 151. If the loading port 1019 and the discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in a tokoroten manner so that the old and new can be replaced, the sharpness can always be maintained.
In addition, in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, reference numeral 1021 is a pinching secant line portion for the operation line L cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L is provided on the pinching secant line portion 1021. It is designed to bite into it. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150 g, so that the certainty of fraud prevention is ensured. Is improved.

Further, in the above-described form, an example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown, but there is also a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, a fraudulent act (the above-mentioned fraudulent acts A, B) in which the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached invades the game area 5a by using the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port (opening for the ball) to the game area 5a. There is a risk of fraudulent activity similar to. In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port to the gaming area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described form are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second bent portion as described above. Fraud prevention measures may be provided. This makes it possible to further enhance the deterrent effect of fraudulent activity using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as a second fraud prevention means, but a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, but instead, a tapered shape provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A slit-shaped catching portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured in the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guiding portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q may be sandwiched by the catching portion which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same fraud deterrent effect as the above-mentioned form.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidation member 7000. However, as a special measure for the above-mentioned fraudulent act A, FIG. 37G , FIG. 37H and FIG. 37K show that the illegal ball Q is prevented from entering through the ball opening (preventing the reverse / reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. By providing advance prevention means, fraud due to fraudulent ball Q is prevented.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37G, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the course change part (the part directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) of the return passage part 1014. Not only that, it can be exemplified that the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the fraudulent ball Q itself to another passage and blocking the movement is provided (first fraudulent ball reversal prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A in which the fraudulent ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. In addition, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction in which the backflowing illegal ball Q enters the attracting portion 1022 at the inlet portion of the attracting portion 1022 (allowing the invasion into the attracting portion 1022 and from the attracting portion 1022) A one-sided valve that makes it impossible to leave the ball (not shown) may be provided, whereby a trace of using the fraudulent ball Q and evidence of cheating can be left.
Further, as shown in FIG. 37H, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the backflow (backflow) of the illegal ball Q. Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of regurgitating the fraudulent ball Q such as the fraudulent act A described above without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. The operation line nullification member 7000D shown in FIG. 37K is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.
Further, of course, the static operation line invalidation member and the dynamic operation line invalidation member described above may have both of them.

Further, in the above embodiment, an operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but the operation line invalidation member is provided with, for example, a foul ball drop port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position or between the foul ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

Further, in the above-described form, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape of the first protrusion 182a and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, it detects static electricity acting on the handle 182 or the like of the player and applies the static electricity to the handle 182 or the like of the player. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall up and down so that the game ball B can be discharged. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / exit 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically near the left end and a through port 213b penetrating vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the loaned game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a tubular front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 after removing the upper plate ball. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiing guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the lower front end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the plate can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 340. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower left decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the circular arcs constituting the outer and upper parts extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b, which is arranged in a plurality of positions. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged so as to be spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and the elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The central button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrudes rearward from the bottom 373b and is inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button main body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and has an annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and a cylindrical board portion 378a extending upward from the inner circumference of the central button body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moving upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force lower than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. .. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. There is. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and a wider variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decorations 410b are turned off, so that the side window 410a The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the above. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, the light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is provided with a door frame top bottom plate 454 that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b of the plate. 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer circumference of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. After the payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the side and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. , And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). It is formed (see FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door frame passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is configured to be. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded mold material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position at the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while being supplied, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B struck by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch ball passage (see FIG. 37A) of the launch passage portion 1012 composed of the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game area 5a. Driven in.

If the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 37A, between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001. It falls from the foul ball drop port 1013 opened in the above to the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and passes from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the opening at the upper end of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the above (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

In the guidance passage 570a, the depth on the front-back right side and the width in the left-right direction are formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is used for the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end of the sill.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The front view of the actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected to the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball-extracting guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball-extracting guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. It is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 and the outer periphery of the base panel 1110 with the outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001. , The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the start which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. The attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit 2100 and It is provided with a frame-shaped center member 2500 that is mounted above the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 mounted on the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with a plurality of back effect units 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out ball opening 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball mouth 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the base panel 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this base panel 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The base panel 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the base panel 1110 is formed with a plurality of through holes 1112 that penetrate the base panel 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the base panel 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the base panel 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the base panel 1110 detachably, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction 1121. It has.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. It can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 has a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening via the panel relay board 3031. It is connected to the sensor 3001, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 99, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. The first special hold number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to 2002, and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004. The second special symbol display 1406 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result and the second special holding number display 1407 consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. And have.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display 1408.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 101. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and insert the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110, and a part of the rear end penetrates through the through hole 1112. It projects rearward from the rear surface of the base panel 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out ball opening 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

The table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out ball opening 1008, and has a starting port unit 2100 having one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002, and a starting port unit 2100. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. And a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center member 2500.

The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 has a large gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B that has been received by the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a large winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 102). Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a start port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into 2004.

The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is arranged on the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is mounted on the front. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. ..

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center member 2500 excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center member 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 that is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 that is open to the warp outlet 2502, and a stage shelf 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 is rolled in the left-right direction.

The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110). ) Is formed in a wavy shape so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage shelf 2503, the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides thereof are lowered toward the front. It is inclined, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center member 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage shelf 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the center member 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side of the upper surface are between the outer periphery of the game area 5a (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) in the front view. It is attached so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Then, the attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper part of the right side surface of the center member 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center member 2500, the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, the game ball B can be accepted for the large winning opening 2005 that is open (open) with a high probability.

Although not shown in detail, the front effect unit 2600 depends on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , It is equipped with a plurality of effect decorations that can move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light emission effects. The front effect unit 2600 can perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorative bodies, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present various patterns of effect to the player. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the lower board holder 1200. It is discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower board holder 1200. Will be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 mounted on the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with a back effect unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c. A notch 3010d is provided, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center of the left side of the rear view of the portion 3010b in the vertical direction and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning opening sensor 3001, and a first. (1) The purpose is to relay the connection with the start port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

Although not shown in detail, the back effect unit 3100 depends on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , It is equipped with a plurality of effect decorations that can move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light emission effects. The back effect unit 3100 can perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorative bodies, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present various patterns of effect to the player. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to input detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive to drive various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. Detection signals from the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405. , Status display 1401, normal symbol display 1402, normal hold display 1403, first special symbol display 1404, first special hold number display 1405, second special of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special hold number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the grand prize opening sensor 2403 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. Therefore, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for ejecting the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal) as sound information. , 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board of the game board 5 are input with a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is generated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the launch passage portion 1012 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the launch rail 544 and the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center member 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the striking is. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is an obstacle nail. By abutting against the game ball B, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center member 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) and is centered. It will flow down the area on the left side of the member 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the region on the left side of the center member 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage shelf 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, from either the central top in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. It is released forward. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central top of the stage shelf 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the top is located directly above the first start port 2002. Be done. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 is released into the game area 5a from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the game area 5a is the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 etc.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center member 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200, and is moved to the general winning opening 2001 or the starting opening of the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center member 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500 (so-called right-handed hit), the center It is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the member 2500. This portion is provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is drawn at the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). It should be noted that the game ball B is drawn by accepting the game balls B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change". There are "time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", etc.

The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are the special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are received between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball B is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Will be done. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is changed to display the pattern sequence in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, back effect unit 3100, and the like are appropriately used to produce light emission. It is possible to perform a movable effect, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

In addition, as described below, the above-mentioned form includes a background technique in which Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29741 is a prior patent document, and many technical means for solving a problem.

[Background technology]
Pachinko machines and other gaming machines have a gaming board that has a gaming area where games are played, and a door frame that has a door window that closes the front side of the gaming board so that the gaming area can be seen from the front. By playing a game in the game area that can be seen through the door window, the player can be entertained.

This type of gaming machine is equipped with a storage plate for storing a game medium for playing a game, and has a bulging portion on the front surface of the door frame that bulges from below the door window to the front, and a bulging portion. A decorative body attached to the upper surface and a body provided with the decorative body have been proposed (for example, prior patent documents). According to the technique of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, it is difficult to see the decorative body when the gaming machine is viewed from the front or the side. The decoration effect by the body was weak, and the appealing power to the player was insufficient. Further, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his / her hand on the storage plate, a part of the decorative body is hidden by the player's hand, so that, for example, the decorative body is luminescently decorated. At that time, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the luminescent decoration, and some players may feel lost because they did not notice the luminescent decoration, which may reduce the interest in the game.

[Solution]
In view of the above circumstances, the present invention provides a gaming machine that has a high appeal to the player and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game by the luminous decoration.

[Technical means to solve problems]
Means 1: In a gaming machine
"A game board that has a game area where games are played, and
A main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that opens and closes the front side of the main body frame so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion on the front surface of the door frame base that bulges forward from a portion below the door window and is provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area. ,
Attached to the bulge, the front end is in front of the front end of the storage dish, from the front surface of the door frame base to the front, to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base. With a protruding ornament,
The decorative body is provided with a decorative body light emitting means that emits light and decorates the decorative body according to a game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. "

Here, as the "game", "a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium is driven to the specific entrance. When the special lottery result in which an advantageous game state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific reception to pay out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game medium, so that the game medium is aimed at a specific reception. "Game to drive", "Game to drive the game medium aiming at the entrance where the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given", "Multiple symbols with multiple symbols after the game medium is put in" After rotating the rotating body, a game in which the rotation of each rotating body is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of the game medium is given ", and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "spherical ones (game balls)", "disk-shaped ones (medals)", and the like.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is performed, there are a plurality of entrances where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player and a privilege including the payout of the game medium is given according to the acceptance of the game medium. Each has multiple symbols, and each is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the input of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. An area in which a plurality of rotating fuselage bodies are arranged to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given according to the above, and the like can be mentioned.

In addition, the "main body frame" includes "a frame-shaped outer frame that can be attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the gaming machine is installed so that it can be opened and closed (hinge can be rotated)" and "the gaming machine". Examples include those that are directly attached to the island equipment of the game hall to be installed, and those that are equipped with a device for paying out game media for playing games.

Further, as the "bulging portion", in addition to the storage plate, "a storage plate having an operation unit operated by the player to play the game" and "a storage plate for storing the game medium for playing the game" are provided. "Equipped", "Equipped with a production operation unit that can accept the player's operation when the player participation type production is executed", "Lending operation unit that rents out the game medium for playing the game" Those equipped with ", etc.

In addition, examples of the "storage dish" include "a plurality of dishes that are vertically separated from each other", "a dish that is provided with only one dish", and the like.

Furthermore, the "decorative body" includes "a model of a predetermined item in line with the concept of a gaming machine", "a model of a predetermined character in line with the concept of a gaming machine", and "a model of a predetermined character in line with the concept of a gaming machine". It imitates a given scene. " The reason why the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decorative body is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base is that the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the total width. This is because the amount of protrusion to the front is about the same as that of a conventional gaming machine, and the appealing power to the player cannot be sufficiently enhanced. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the total width, the decorative body protrudes too much to the front. This is because there is a risk that it will interfere with the player and it will be difficult to be selected as a gaming machine to play.

In addition, "according to the game state" means "a game to a reception port (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, a large winning opening, a character winning opening, a V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area). "According to the acceptance of the medium", "According to the game medium circulating in the game area passing through a specific area (for example, a gate, a warp passage, a stage shelf, etc.)", "Arranged in the game area" According to the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium to the entrance (for example, the starting port) "," the lottery by accepting the game medium to the receiving entrance (for example, the starting port) arranged in the game area " Depending on the type of effect (for example, reach effect, big hit effect, loss effect, etc.) to suggest the result of the special lottery, "a plurality of symbols are provided for each with the introduction of the game medium. "According to the rotation of the rotating fuselage", "In response to the combination of the symbols of the stopped rotating fuselage, the plurality of rotating fuselage bodies each provided with a plurality of symbols are rotated and then stopped in sequence. , "According to the amount of the gaming medium driven into the game area", "Depending on the length of the driving blank of the game medium driven into the game area", and the like.

Further, as the "decorative body light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent sphere", "neon sphere", "cold cathode tube", etc. Can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine can open and close a gaming board having a gaming area in which a game is played, a main body frame that holds the gaming board detachably from the front, and the front side of the main body frame. The door frame base has a door window that is closed to the front and the game area can be seen from the front, and the front of the door frame base bulges forward from the part below the door window. A bulge having a storage tray capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and a bulge attached to the bulge, in front of the front end of the storage tray, from the front to the front of the door frame base. A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base, and a light emitting decoration according to a game state that changes as the decorative body is played in the game area. It is provided with a decorative body light emitting means for causing the door to emit light.

As a result, a bulging portion provided with a storage plate capable of storing the game medium bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. At the same time, the bulging portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base and the front end projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when this game machine is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the decoration body protrudes forward greatly below the door window where the inside of the game area can be seen, so that the decoration body stands out more than other game machines. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, enhance the appeal to the player, and make it easier to select the main game machine as the game machine to be played. Further, since the front end of the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage plate, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his / her hand on the storage plate, the part hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body. When the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body, so that the player does not feel lost and the deterioration of the interest in the game is suppressed. Can be made to.

In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, when the player sits in front of the game machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, when the decorative body is luminescent and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, the light irradiates the player from below, and the luminescent decoration of the decorative body directs the player's line of sight to the decorative body. By directing the player's line of sight to the decorative body below, it is possible to keep the inside of the game area provided in front from the player's field of view and make it difficult to see the inside of the game area. .. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the effect image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., by illuminating the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, the player is made to pay attention to the decorative body below the game area, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area, By changing the production image and the movable body, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there is no such thing, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the decorative body can be noticed by emitting and decorating the decorative body according to the game state, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area in that gap. It is possible to indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous) by the luminous decoration of. As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the luminescent decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the decorative body is luminescent and decorated, and the player is entertained and enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, he / she looks away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area can be easily seen. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

The decorative body may be smoothly curved so as to project forward. As a result, the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is smoothly curved, so that even if it comes into contact with the player, there is no risk of damaging the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decorative body is not dangerous enough to cause an injury just by looking at the decorative body, so that the player can select this gaming machine with confidence as the gaming machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game with this gaming machine and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, it is desirable to attach the decorative body to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. As a result, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced to facilitate the selection of the game machine as the game machine to be played. Further, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both hands of the player can be easily extended forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area can be used. It is possible to facilitate the operation, handle the game medium stored in the storage plate, and the like, making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the decorative body may be provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc shape. As a result, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body has a shape in which half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, and the game can be played. It is possible to make a person play a game in a calm mood, to concentrate the player on the game and suppress a decline in interest, and it is difficult for the player to get injured even if he / she makes contact at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe, and by reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game. Further, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, when the entire first decorative portion is luminescently decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, it looks like an annular fluorescent lamp. The luminescent decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. At the same time, when the luminescent decoration is performed, for example, if the luminescent decoration is made so that light flows from one side, the inside of the donut can be decorated. Since it is possible to show the player a light emission effect as if the light is moving and rotating, it is possible to surprise the player and make them think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, the decorative body is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and has a semicircular arc-shaped cross section. A second decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward may be further provided. As a result, the first decoration part and the second decoration part can show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and the bulge part provided with the storage plate can be improved in appearance. At the same time, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part and the decorative body can be made to look larger. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that strongly attracts the interest of. Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged one above the other, the light is emitted so that the light rotates by appropriately emitting and decorating each of them by the decorative body light emitting means. It is possible to show the player the effect and the light emission effect that the light moves up and down, entertain the player, and at the same time, show the player various light emission effects, which makes the player bored. It is possible to make it difficult to make it difficult to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, an effect operation unit that can accept the operation of the player according to the game state may be provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body. As a result, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player operates the production operation unit, so that the player participation type It is possible to entertain the production and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. At this time, by illuminating the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the effect operation unit is attached, so that the player who operates the effect operation unit can be attracted. When the participatory effect is executed, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (effect operation unit) and the operation of the effect operation unit can be prompted, and the player can perform the effect operation. By operating the club, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, or the like from coming into contact with the effect operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the effect operation unit, and it is possible to surely entertain the player-participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to make it easier to select a machine, and the progress of the game (for example, a game medium) so that the player-participatory production can be executed at an early stage by raising the expectation for the player-participation-type production that operates the production operation unit. (Game ball) driving operation, start of rotation of the rotating body by inserting a game medium (medal), etc.) can be promoted, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the effect operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player and the inside of the rotation operation unit. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform the pressing operation. As a result, since the rotation operation unit that can be rotated and the pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation is performed in the player participation type production that can accept the operation of the production operation unit. It is possible to let the player operate by appropriately combining the pressing operation and the pressing operation, and it is possible to correspond to the production requiring more complicated input (operation of the player), so that a more versatile player participation type production can be played. It can be presented to a person, can entertain the player, can make the player less bored, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Further, in this case, since the decorative body to which the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit are attached to the upper surface can be light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, the decorative body is displayed when the player participation type production is executed. By making the light emitting decoration, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the decorative body (the effect operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit) and prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit, and the player can operate the effect operation unit. By making it entertain the player participation type production, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. At this time, since it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body, the player can be urged to perform the rotation operation unit or pressing. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and the player-participatory production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when the upper surface of the decorative body is provided with an annular rotation operation unit and a pressing operation unit arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit as the effect operation unit, the pressing operation is performed. Even if the portion is made movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position depending on the gaming state. good. As a result, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit is in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large together with the rotation operation unit. Since it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration look bigger and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and increasing the appeal to the player more than other gaming machines. At the same time, the pressing operation unit protrudes greatly upward, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit, which raises the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation unit and suppresses the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the pressing operation portion in the ring of the rotation operating portion attached to the upper surface of the decorative body can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player can move the pressing operating portion in the protruding position. A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that enables pressing operation and a cylindrical center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. It may be configured by the pressing operation unit. As a result, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the player participation type production in which the player operates each operation unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be done. Further, in this case, by illuminating the decorative body, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and the operation thereof is promoted. It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to provide an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state. As a result, the effect operation unit can be light-emitting and decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state. Therefore, the light-emitting decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means can be executed at the same time. , The entire bulging part that bulges forward below the door window can be luminescent and decorated, and the bulging part can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the whole is luminescent decoration. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Further, in this case, by decorating the effect operation unit with light emitting means by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit, so that the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit can be achieved. When executed, the effect operation unit is light-emitting and decorated to direct the player's attention to the effect operation unit and prompt the operation, and the player is allowed to operate the effect operation unit to participate in the player participation type effect. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the front surface of the door frame base may be further provided with a peripheral decorative body that is continuous with the decorative body attached to the bulging portion and extends so as to surround the outer periphery of the door frame. As a result, the entire outer circumference of the gaming area can be decorated, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is desirable to provide a peripheral decorative body light emitting means for luminescent decoration of the peripheral decorative body, and the peripheral decorative body of the bulging portion and the peripheral decorative body are each luminescent decorated to illuminate the outer periphery of the game area. Therefore, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the effect display means capable of displaying the effect image may be provided in the center of the game area in the front view. As a result, in addition to the game performed in the game area, the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on the effect display means, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, during the display of the effect image by the effect display means, when the effect image is switched, the decorative body is made to emit light so that the player's line of sight is directed to the decorative body below the game area, so that it is difficult to notice the switching of the effect image. can do. Then, when the player turns his or her eyes to the effect display means after the effect image is switched, the effect image can be surprised by the change, and the effect image can be more enjoyed and the effect can be produced before you know it. By switching the images, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The decorative body is
It is characterized by being "smoothly curved and protruding forward".

According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved so as to project forward.

As a result, the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is smoothly curved, so that even if it comes into contact with the player, there is no risk of damaging the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decorative body is not dangerous enough to cause an injury just by looking at the decorative body, so that the player can select this gaming machine with confidence as the gaming machine to play. It is possible to entertain the game with this gaming machine and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The decorative body is
It is characterized in that it is "attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction".

According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, which appeals to the player. It is possible to make it easier to select the main game machine as a game machine for playing with increased power. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area. ), And the game medium stored in the storage plate can be easily handled, so that the player is less likely to be stressed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3.
"The decorative body is
It has a semicircular arcuate cross-sectional shape and is provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward. "

According to the configuration of the means 4, the decorative body is provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular ring shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc shape.

As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body is formed so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward, so that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. It is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and the player can play the game in a calm mood, so that the player can concentrate on the game. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game, and at first glance, the player can recognize that it is a safe one that is not easily injured even if it comes into contact with it. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion has a semi-doughnut shape, when the entire first decorative portion is luminescent and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state, light emission like an annular fluorescent lamp is emitted. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you to think that there is something good, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 5: In the configuration of means 4,
"The decorative body is
The front end is arranged below the first decorative portion so as to be located behind the first decorative portion, and has a semicircular arcuate cross-sectional shape and extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward. It is characterized by having a second decorative part.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the decorative body is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is located behind the first decorative portion, and bulges outward in a semicircular cross-sectional shape. The second decorative part extending in a semicircular ring is further provided.

As a result, the first decoration part and the second decoration part can show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and the bulge part provided with the storage plate can be improved in appearance. At the same time, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part and the decorative body can be made to look larger. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that strongly attracts the interest of.

In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first and second decorative parts are arranged one above the other, the light emitting effect that the light rotates can be achieved by appropriately emitting and decorating each of them by the decorative body light emitting means. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that the light moves up and down, to entertain the player, and to show the player a variety of light emission effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 6: In any one of means 1 to 5,
"It is further provided with an effect operation unit that is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state." To do.

Here, as the "directing operation unit", "rotation operation unit capable of rotation operation", "press operation unit capable of pressing operation", "touch operation unit capable of touch operation", and "slide operation unit capable of slide operation". , "Stick operation unit capable of stick operation", "composite operation unit capable of rotation operation and pressing operation", and the like. Further, the "directing operation unit" may be one that is in contact with the upper surface of the decorative body, or may be one that protrudes from the upper surface of the decorative body.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the gaming machine is further provided with an effect operation unit that is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body and can accept the operation of the player according to the gaming state. is there.

As a result, since the effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the effect operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player By operating the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. At this time, by illuminating the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the effect operation unit is attached, so that the player who operates the effect operation unit can be attracted. When the participatory effect is executed, by making the decorative body emit light and decorate, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (effect operation unit) and the operation of the effect operation unit can be prompted, and the player can perform the effect operation. By operating the club, it is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, etc. from coming into contact with the effect operation unit. It is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the production operation unit, and it is possible to surely entertain the player-participation-type production that operates the production operation unit and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player, and this gaming machine is selected as the gaming machine to play. The progress of the game (for example, a game medium (game ball)) can be made easier, and the player-participatory effect for operating the effect operation unit can be raised so that the player-participatory effect can be executed at an early stage. ), The start of rotation of the rotating body by inserting the game medium (medal), etc.) can be promoted, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the decorative body decorates the outside of the effect operation unit, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit can be improved. , The production operation unit can be made to stand out, and it can be a gaming machine that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The production operation unit is
An annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player,
It is characterized in that it includes a pressing operation unit that the player can perform a pressing operation in the ring of the rotation operation unit. "

Here, examples of the "rotation operation unit" include "a unit that can be rotated by driving a motor in addition to the rotation operation of the player", "rotated only by the rotation operation of the player", and the like.

Further, the "pressing operation unit" includes a "cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit along the inner circumference of the rotation operation unit and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit provided in the outer peripheral pressing operation unit". , "One columnar thing", "One with a cross key and an arrow key", and the like. Further, examples of the "pressing operation unit" include "a unit capable of advancing and retreating in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the protruding position", "a unit immovable in the vertical direction", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit is provided with an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit. It was done.

As a result, since the rotation operation unit that can be rotated and the pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided as the production operation unit, the rotation operation is performed in the player participation type production that can accept the operation of the production operation unit. It is possible to let the player operate by appropriately combining the pressing operation and the pressing operation, and it is possible to correspond to the production requiring more complicated input (operation of the player), so that a more versatile player participation type production can be played. It can be presented to a person, can entertain the player, can make the player less bored, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, since the decorative body to which the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit are attached to the upper surface can be light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means, the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated when the player participation type production is executed. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the effect operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit) to encourage the operation of the effect operation unit, and the player can operate the effect operation unit. It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest. At this time, since it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body, the player can be urged to perform the rotation operation unit or pressing. The operation unit can be operated accurately, and the player-participatory production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

It is desirable that the diameter of the rotation operation unit be larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the storage pan. As a result, the front end side of the rotation operation unit is in a state of protruding greatly forward from the storage plate, so that the rotation operation unit can be made to stand out greatly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is different from other gaming machines, and it is possible to easily select the main gaming machine as the gaming machine to be played. Further, when the diameter of the rotation operation unit is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation unit is for the rotation operation, and the game is played when the player participation type production is executed. It is possible to make it easier for a person to participate in the production, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotation operation portion is increased, the inner diameter of the rotation operation portion can be increased to increase the pressing operation portion in the ring. Therefore, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion is performed. It can be facilitated, and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Means 8: In the configuration of means 7,
"The pressing operation unit is
It is possible to move between a retracted position that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position according to the gaming state. " It is characterized by being.

Here, as the "pressing operation unit" that can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, "the one that can be moved to the retracted position when the player presses the position in the protruding position" and "the player in the protruding position". Even if the pressing operation is performed, the object cannot be moved to the retracted position. "

According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation portion is placed between the retracted position slightly protruding upward from the upper surface of the rotating operating portion and the protruding position protruding upward from the retracted position depending on the gaming state. , It is made movable.

As a result, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit is in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is large together with the rotation operation unit. Since it looks like it bulges upward, it can make the surroundings of the decoration look bigger and give a strong impact to the player, making the decoration stand out and increasing the appeal to the player more than other gaming machines. At the same time, the pressing operation unit protrudes greatly upward, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation unit, which raises the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation unit and suppresses the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, since the pressing operation unit can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player's attention can be directed to the rotation operation unit at the retracted position, and the player's interest can be directed at the protruding position. Since it can be directed to the pressing operation unit, by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation unit, and the game can be played. It is possible to allow a person to accurately operate the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit to enjoy the player participation type production.

Means 9: In the configuration of Means 8
"The pressing operation unit is
A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position,
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and has a columnar central pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. " It is characterized by being.

According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation unit is arranged in a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform the pressing operation at the protruding position, and in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit. It is provided with a cylindrical central pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player at any position.

As a result, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the player participation type production in which the player operates each operation unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. Can be done. Further, by illuminating the decorative body, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and their operations can be promoted. It is possible to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation are performed. When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit are in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately use the operation unit that can be operated by the player according to the content of the player participation type production, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions and to entertain the player with various operations. This makes it difficult for players to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen, so that the player can have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusion player tries to rotate the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit does not rotate, so that the game is played. The person can be impatient, and the player can be entertained by giving a feeling of tension to the flow of the production.

Means 10: In any one of means 6 to 9,
It is characterized in that "the operation unit light emitting means for making the effect operation unit emit light according to the game state is further provided".

Here, as the "operation unit light emitting means", "full color LED", "monochromatic LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent sphere", "neon sphere", "cold cathode tube", etc. Can be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine is further provided with an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state.

As a result, the effect operation unit can be light-emitting and decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state. Therefore, the light-emitting decoration of the effect operation unit and the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means can be executed at the same time. , The entire bulging part that bulges forward below the door window can be luminescent and decorated, and the bulging part can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the whole is luminescent decoration. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit is light-emittingly decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit, so that the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit is executed. Occasionally, by illuminating the production operation unit, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the production operation unit and encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit, the player participation type production is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 11: In a gaming machine
"A game board that has a game area where games are played, and
A main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front,
A door frame base having a door window that opens and closes the front side of the main body frame so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion on the front surface of the door frame base that bulges forward from a portion below the door window and is provided with a storage plate capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area. ,
The door frame is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, has a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape, and extends in a semicircular ring so as to bulge outward, and the front end is in front of the front end of the storage tray. The first decorative portion protruding from the front surface of the base to the front by a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the total width of the door frame base, and the front end thereof so as to be located behind the first decorative portion. A decorative body that is arranged below the first decorative part and has a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape that extends outward in a semicircular ring shape, and a decorative body that has a second decorative part.
A decorative body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the decorative body according to a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area.
An annular rotation operation unit attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and capable of rotation operation by the player, and an upper surface of the rotation operation unit according to the gaming state in the ring of the rotation operation unit. A cylinder that can be moved between a retracted position that protrudes slightly upward and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and the player can perform a pressing operation at the projected position. It is composed of a shape-shaped outer peripheral pressing operation unit and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit and can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. A production operation unit that is equipped with a pressing operation unit and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state,
The effect operation unit is provided with an operation unit light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state. "

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine can open and close the game board having the game area where the game is played, the main body frame that holds the game board detachably from the front, and the front side of the main body frame. The door frame base has a door window that is closed to the front and the game area can be seen from the front, and the front of the door frame base bulges forward from the part below the door window. A bulging part equipped with a storage tray capable of storing a game medium for playing a game in the area, and a bulging part attached to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction, and bulging outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape. The front end protrudes forward from the front end of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base in front of the front end of the storage tray. One decorative part and the front end are arranged below the first decorative part so as to be located behind the first decorative part, and have a semi-arc-shaped cross-sectional shape and extend in a semi-circular shape so as to bulge outward. From the decorative body provided with the second decorative portion, the decorative body light emitting means for illuminating the decorative body according to the changing game state due to the game being performed in the game area, and the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body. Also attached to the rear, in the annular rotation operation unit that the player can rotate, and in the ring of the rotation operation unit, the retracted position that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit depending on the game state. And the protruding position that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit that allows the player to perform the pressing operation at the protruding position, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit. It is equipped with a pressing operation unit consisting of a columnar central pressing operation unit that is arranged in the cylinder and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. It is provided with an effect operation unit capable of accepting operations and an operation unit light emitting means for displaying the effect operation unit with light emission according to a game state.

As a result, a bulging portion provided with a storage plate capable of storing the game medium bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. At the same time, the bulging portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base and the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. It is provided with a central pressing operation unit, an outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and a rotation operation unit arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the door. As a result, when the game machine is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the decorative body with the effect operation unit mounted on the upper surface protrudes forward greatly below the door window where the inside of the game area can be visually recognized. The decoration can be made more conspicuous than other gaming machines, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and this gaming machine can be selected as the gaming machine to be played. It can be made easier. Further, since the front end of the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage plate, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his / her hand on the storage plate, the part hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body. When the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated by the light-emitting means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body, so that the player does not feel lost and the deterioration of the interest in the game is suppressed. Can be made to.

In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, if the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated by the decorative body light-emitting means or the effect operation unit is light-emitting and decorated by the operation unit light-emitting means according to the game state, the light illuminates the player from below. The light emitting decoration of the decorative body and the effect operation unit can direct the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body and the effect operation unit, and the player's line of sight can be directed downward to provide the game in front. It is possible to keep the inside of the area away from the player's field of view and make it difficult to see the inside of the game area. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening, etc.) opens and closes. At the time of, etc., by illuminating the decorative body and the effect operation unit, the player is directed to the lower side of the game area, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area, the effect image or the movable body By changing such things, it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the decorative body can be noticed by emitting and decorating the decorative body according to the game state, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area in that gap. It is possible to indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous) by the luminous decoration of. As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the luminescent decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the decorative body is luminescent and decorated, and the player is entertained and enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire decorative body, he / she looks away from the gaming machine, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area can be easily seen. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to make it easier to select the main game machine as the game machine to play by increasing the number of players. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the operation unit (handle) for driving the game medium into the game area. ), And the game medium stored in the storage plate can be easily handled, so that the player is less likely to be stressed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below the decorative body are formed to extend in a semicircular ring shape so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward, the cylinder is formed. Since half of the tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, and the player can play the game in a calm mood. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, it is possible for the player to recognize that it is a safe thing that is hard to be injured even if it comes into contact with it at first glance. By reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, by simultaneously illuminating the decorative body and the effect operation unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body, the entire bulging portion that bulges forward below the door window can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the bulge can be made to stand out and the player's attention can be strongly attracted, and the overall luminescent decoration can make the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to direct the interest of the person to the production operation unit and encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion have a semi-doughnut shape, the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are luminescently decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the game state. , A luminous decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you to think that there is something good, and the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the decoration is in the direction in which the light of the first decoration part and the second decoration part is rotating. The player can be encouraged to rotate in the same direction as. Alternatively, by alternately illuminating the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged vertically, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light moves up and down, and at the same time, up and down. The moving light can urge the player to perform a pressing operation on the outer peripheral pressing operation unit or the central pressing operation unit. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion with light emission, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit. On the other hand, the rotation operation unit or the pressing operation unit can be accurately operated, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, on the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. , It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the player participation type production in which the player operates each operation unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. it can.

Further, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation are performed. When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit are in a state of protruding upward from the rotation operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer peripheral pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately use the operation unit that can be operated by the player according to the content of the player participation type production, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions and to entertain the player with various operations. This makes it difficult for players to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

Further, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen, so that the player can have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit is executed, even if the illusion player tries to rotate the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit does not rotate, so that the game is played. The person can be impatient, and the player can be entertained by giving a feeling of tension to the flow of the production.

Means 12: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 11.
The gaming machine
A plurality of receptions arranged in the game area and capable of accepting game media, and
The pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game medium into the reception port.

Here, as the "reception port", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". A special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a start winning opening (starting opening) "," By accepting the game medium at a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, the game medium can be used in the game area. Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, "ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be used in a specific area (for example, a gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area, such as a variable winning opening (variable starting port, accessory winning opening, etc.) that can accept the game medium. Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous include a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result and the advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state. When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It has an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting a game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous.

According to the configuration of the means 12, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area in which the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the receiving entrance where the gaming medium can be received, and the game to the receiving entrance. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the medium. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It is desirable that the light emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the reception port. As a result, when the game medium is accepted into the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the decorative body is luminescently decorated. Therefore, the game medium is driven into the reception by entertaining the player. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the drawn special lottery result is presented to the player when suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decorative body may be luminescently decorated by the decorative body light emitting means. As a result, the decorative body emits and decorates, so that the player can be entertained by giving a strong impact to the player due to the above-mentioned action and effect. Therefore, the player can obtain the result of the special lottery drawn for the player. It is possible to make people think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "big hit"), raise expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, and suppress a decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect by emitting and decorating the decorative body, an effect for suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player (for example, It can be suitably used for (reach production), entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from Means 1 to Means 11.
The gaming machine
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted, and a start operation unit.
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and
A slot machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating bodies". An internal lottery is executed when the rotation starts, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the lottery internal lottery is given. " It has been done ”, etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 13, a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols and a starting operation unit for rotating the plurality of rotating bodies by the player operating the gaming machine after the game medium is loaded. According to the combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating cylinders and a stop symbol by all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units respectively. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It should be noted that the light emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means is when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of the winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorative bodies by the driving means may be rotated. As a result, the decorative body is light-emittingly decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, the lottery result of the internal lottery may be such that the decorative body emits light-decorates when the winning combination is won. As a result, the decorative body emits light-emitting decoration, which can give a strong impact to the player. When stopped at a specific combination of symbols, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "BB"), which raises the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect by emitting and decorating the decorative body, it is suitable for the effect of suggesting the drawn internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 14: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 11.
The gaming machine
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. After that, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, for example). , Advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. As a result, in a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It should be noted that the light emitting decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light emitting means is when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of the winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects to be presented to the player, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, or the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination. However, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[effect]
As described above, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high appeal to the player and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game by the light emitting decoration.

[Relationship between the above form and the above technical means]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is in the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are in the storage plate of the present invention, and the effect operation unit cover unit in the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of 310 are used as the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment is used as the first decorative portion of the present invention. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is used as the second decorative part of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 in the present embodiment are used as the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The substrate 352, the central button decorative substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention, respectively.

[Characteristic effects of this form]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed in a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 in which the main body frame 4 is openably closed. The plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that can be stored bulges forward, and the front end of the plate unit 200 is about 1/2 the total width of the door frame base 101. A central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit are provided concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, as well as having an effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101. It includes a 303b and a rotation operation unit 302. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in which the effect operation unit 301 is attached to the upper surface is below the door window 101a in which the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the plate unit 200 (directing operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more prominent than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be appealed. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. Further, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly projected forward below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. At the same time, the length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his / her hand on the upper plate 201, the portion hidden by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emittingly decorated by the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the player is given a light-emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312. It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is light-emitting and decorated by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 according to the game state. When the effect operation unit 301 is light-emitting and decorated by the ring decorative substrate 352, the center button decorative substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The light emitting decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front. Can be kept away from the player's view to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start port 2004 or the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. In addition, the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are light-emittingly decorated to direct the player to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area 5a, the effect image or movable By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as described above, the unit front cover 312 is light-emittingly decorated according to the game state to attract attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a in the gap. , The light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, a premium feeling can be given to the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emitting decoration, and the player can be enjoyed. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the unit front cover 312 is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he / she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area is viewed. Is easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine that enhances the appeal to the player and plays the game. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 for the purpose, the handling of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201, and the like, making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semicircular ring shape, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, which makes it possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and it is difficult for the player to get injured even if he / she makes contact at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe, and by reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, by simultaneously emitting and decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 protruding from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish unit 200 bulging forward below the door window 101a. Since the entire light-emitting decoration can be made to stand out, the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and there is nothing good for the player due to the light-emitting decoration of the whole. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the production operation unit 301 to encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit 301, the player participation type production can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are formed in a semi-doughnut shape, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are used to upper the plate center depending on the game state. When the entire decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate are luminescently decorated, the luminescent decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and make people think that there is something good, and at the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is mounted on the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body. The player can be urged to rotate the light of 312b in the same direction as the light is rotating. Alternatively, by alternately illuminating the upper plate decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b arranged vertically, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light moves up and down. At the same time, the light moving up and down can urge the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the upper center decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the player is urged to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, it extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. On the right side unit 410 of the flat plate-shaped door frame, three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. The 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, so that the inside of the three side windows in the side window 410a is turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island facility) of the pachinko machine 1 through the space between the decoration portions 410b. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. , The game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

At this time, in the door frame 3 whose left side side with respect to the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, of the two outer sides in the left-right direction of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the part of the door, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, as if it were seen by another player. By making it hard to feel, it is possible to let other players play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and the game changes to a predetermined game state, the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 causes the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window to emit light. By dazzling the inside of 410a, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be radiated in a band-like and radial manner, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled so that the opposite side cannot be visually recognized from between. In addition, the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b makes it possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration portion 410b, which diminishes the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a and the side window. The visibility through the 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, as a gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to have an advantage, the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light, and the side is caused by the glare. Visibility through the window 410a is reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the other player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1. Because it is possible to avoid the problem, it makes me feel uncomfortable because other players are worried about it and cannot concentrate on the game, or I feel lost because of the induction of mistakes. Can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, when a game state such as the arrival of a chance, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It can be more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. However, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b do not appear to overlap each other, when the side window interior decoration portion 410b is not emitting light, the opposite side is passed between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the side window 410a. A player who can visually recognize (inside the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without doing so.

Further, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b having a certain height emit light, the portions having the same height in the game area 5a. Can be made difficult for other players to see through the side window 410a. Therefore, by making a specific side window interior decoration portion 410b out of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light according to the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, when a game state such as the arrival of a chance, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It can be more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward long is provided with side windows 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off to turn off the side windows 410a. In the state where the visibility through the pachinko machine is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the island equipment does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily detect that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of the window, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side away from the left side side which is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened for maintenance or work such as replacement of the game board 5, the door frame 3 can be made less likely to get in the way by opening the door frame 3 widely, and deterioration of workability can be prevented. can do.

In addition, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light according to the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player may occur (so-called "big hit" game). Depending on the expected value), the decorative portion 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, etc., when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is made to emit light to make it difficult for other players to see, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state. When it is not done (when it is "lost"), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is not made to emit light or is turned off, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even if it is easily seen by other players (a "big hit"). ) By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player without creating an awkward atmosphere, and at the same time, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, which enhances the interest of the player in the game. You can enjoy the game more.

Further, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming) that is advantageous to the player may occur (so-called "big hit" game). Depending on the expected value), the three side window interior decoration portions 410b may be made to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom sides, etc.), or among the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. The decoration portion 410b in the specific side window of the above may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light in order from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game, and to suggest the expected value, so that the player's sense of expectation for the game can be increased and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition to light emission (lighting) and extinguishing, the light emitting modes of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b as described above include a blinking pattern, a difference in emission color, and a change in emission color (for example, from a cold blue to hot). It may be a change to red in feeling, a change in blue-yellow-red that imitates a traffic signal, etc.), or a change in brightness (brightness), etc. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player can be obtained.

Therefore, on the contrary, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the gaming state is advantageous to the player depending on the presence / absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the above, the player is excited by how the three side window decoration portions 410b emit light during the execution of the effect. -It can be throbbing, raising the player's expectation and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the three side window interior decoration units 410b may be arbitrarily made to emit light or turn off. .. As a result, for example, when there is a low possibility (so-called expected value) of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player has an advantage during a reach effect or a reach development effect, the effect operation is performed. By operating the unit 301 to make the decorative portion 410b in the side window emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into it, so that when an advantageous gaming state does not occur (at the time of "loss"). In addition, it is possible to prevent an awkward atmosphere from being seen by other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when there is a high possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state will occur (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration unit 410b does not emit light. By doing so (or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), even if another player looks into it, an advantageous gaming state will occur, and the atmosphere will not be awkward and the interest will be reduced. In addition to being able to suppress it, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to set the timing and mode of light emission of the three side window interior decoration units 410b. As a result, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set, so that some players feel uncomfortable to be peeped and enjoy the game. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball pulling lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 non-rotatable and the ball pulling passage. Assuming that the 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream cannot be distributed to the ball removal passage 580b by the ball removal movable piece 592. It will continue to circulate to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and can be sent to the payout blade 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball pulling lever 593 is raised (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream moves into the payout passage. Instead of circulating to the downstream side of 580a, it will be distributed to the ball pulling passage 580b beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592, and may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment side via the ball pulling passage 580b. it can. Since the payout blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in the normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 makes the ball pulling movable piece 592 non-rotatable (first state). On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball pulling movable piece 592. The game balls B are paid out one by one at the payout blades 589, and the speed at which the game balls B on the upstream side of the payout blades 589 flow is relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball-extracting movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak and the opposite side of the portion of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 that comes into contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-extracting passage 580b, the ball-extracting movable piece 592 Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball pulling passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, since it is possible to reduce the damage of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a when the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) is replaced or maintained, the ball pulling lever 593 can be raised to rotate the ball pulling movable piece 592. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, flows down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon. In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592. For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The main body frame 4 attached to the main body frame 2 is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame on the left side side with respect to the main body frame 4 and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame (axis core). When the door frame 3 attached to the door frame 3 that can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 extend in parallel facing each other and the main body. Connection connecting the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the frame 4 side with the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. The cable 503 extends toward the shaft core from a portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 toward the shaft core, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h to be mounted in the main body frame 4 After being held by the guide body 502a of the connecting cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the door is further extended to the vicinity of the shaft core, then folded back and extended in a direction away from the shaft core. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the frame 3. It is connected.

Then, when the door frame 3 whose front side of the main body frame 4 is closed (closed) is hinged around the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward so as to move away from the main body frame 4, so that the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the mounting shaft 502c away from the shaft core so that the connection cable guide member 502 tilts with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 as the connection cable 503 is deformed. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this way, the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, so that the connection cable guide The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to get in the way.

In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends the tip portion from the rotatably mounted mounting shaft 502c toward the shaft core side, the base end portion of the guide member can be extended like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded portion of the connection cable 503 can be positioned so as not to be in the way.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 which is open to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 Is moved in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is held without being sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, during maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be smoothly performed, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the connection cable 503 that extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side and then is folded back and extends in a direction away from the shaft core is placed at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connecting cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. Since the tangent line that is in contact and passes through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connecting cable guide member 502 is at an angle or less that intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the axial axis in the longitudinal direction of the connecting cable guide member 502 is the door frame 3. It is possible to prevent the angle from being close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface. Further, on the door frame 3 side, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, the door frame is held with respect to the main body frame 4. When closing 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axis side.

From these facts, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 does not close or the connection cable guide is provided. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the tip of the member 502 abuts on the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is broken. Therefore, when a problem occurs during the game in which the door frame 3 must be opened and closed for maintenance, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. It can be smoothly performed, the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the axis is closer than the cable holder 103a). It is provided at a position close to) and can press the connection cable 503 toward the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by contacting it (the shaft core of the speaker duct 103 rather than the cable holder 103a). A part that protrudes rearward on the side) is provided. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, a tangent line that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and is in contact with a circle that passes through the pressing portion centering on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member The 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the frame pieces 502b are provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate guide body 502a increases and it becomes difficult to bend, so that the connection cable 503 is firmly connected. The connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 composed of many electric wires. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, and the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good condition, and more electric wires can be guided. Since this is possible, the electrical connections between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be integrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, with the connection cable 503 attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 through the through hole 502d of the connecting cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502, and the connecting cable guide member 502 The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by disconnecting the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to avoid the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is under the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since it communicates with the space (internal space 40a of the curtain plate) between the port member 47 and the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the assembly 40, the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side provide the main body frame speaker. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently secured, the deep bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the deep bass sound can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. Can be done. Therefore, by providing the cable mounting recess 501h for mounting the connection cable guide member 502 on the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, the deep bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and a connection cable guide member 502 that exerts the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable mounting recess 501h, and the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. It can be avoided and the door frame 3 can be surely closed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame in the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion port 501b of the base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (player side), and below the door window 101a, the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed. The front end of the port member 47 is open near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member is opened in the lower part of the front surface of the door frame 3. The speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end portion on the opposite side in the left-right direction from 47. Then, the speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4, and the speaker unit 620a covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound such as the sound, music, and sound effect output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 is generated by the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through the speaker ports 211b of the door frame 3 and 621a. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate internal space 40a composed of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. Is transmitted and radiated from the port member 47 to the player side in front. At this time, since the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the enclosure 624 The volume can be increased as much as possible, and the sound extending in the low frequency range can be output forward from the main body frame speaker 622. Further, since the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) in the enclosure 624 are opened. ), The width of the connection portion in the depth direction (front-back direction) can be made larger than before, so that the width of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c in the front-rear direction is increased, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a. It is possible to reduce the attenuation of the sound from the space to the inner space 40a side of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a tubular shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the bass range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member can be inverted. It is possible to output a sound in which the bass is amplified from 47. Then, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined, so that the volume becomes louder. , It is possible to make the player hear a richer bass sound, and it is possible to entertain the player with sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates it forward (so-called a bass-ref type speaker). When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phases of the sound waves are the same as each other, so that the amplitude of the sound wave becomes large and the volume of the sound becomes loud. Compared to the case of using the passive radiator of, the sound output can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion port 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimensions thereof can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a where the game is played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the outer frame lower assembly 40 forming the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion port 501b in the main body frame 4. Since it is possible to make the vertical dimension of the side relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. , The bass can output a richer sound, the player can enjoy the sound, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, since the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c are inclined in the front-rear direction, the connection portion 621c abuts on the connection cylinder portion 43a and abuts each other only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, the same effect as described above can be obtained, and since no sliding resistance is generated between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance and the like.

Further, since the sealing member 48 seals between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board can be relatively reduced. The insertion port 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 having a wider game area 5a, the wider game area 5a can make the player more entertaining, and the wide game area 5a can be provided through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by seeing, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the player.

Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end portion in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end portion on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are separated from each other in the outer frame. 2 (Pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position some distance forward, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and as described above, the player can hear the sound. On the other hand, you can hear rich bass sound.

Further, as described above, since the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is made to interfere with each other in the vicinity of the player and amplified, other pachinko machines 1 are separated from the pachinko machine 1. The player will receive the unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a loud volume and rich bass, which raises expectations for the game. Can be made to. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, so that it is difficult for the pachinko machine 1 to recognize that an opportunity has arrived. It is possible to reduce the number of other players looking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peep causes discomfort to the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set to the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c of the above is the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a with respect to the left-right direction can be set from the vicinity of the left end portion where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center, and the main body frame. In No. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, other members are arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction in between, or the other members are enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the pachinko machine from other pachinko machines by other members, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction in between, the game ball B is discharged to the outside in that space. Base unit 620b provided with a ball pulling-out guide unit 627, a discharge ball receiving unit 628, etc., and a ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , A power supply board 630 that controls the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game medium ball, and the like can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be surely provided with them. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation unit 303a projecting upward from the upper surface of the dish unit 200 protruding forward and downward in the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played. An annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 surrounding the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and an annular rotation operating unit surrounding the outer circumference of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. Since the 302 is arranged so as to be inclined so that the front end side of the upper surface is lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The (face) faces in a certain direction, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily seen, and three large operation units (pressing operation) arranged concentrically. The unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can be operated in a form clearly different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is provided, and it is possible to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines and strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are operated by the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player-participation-type production, and the game is advanced so that the player-participation-type production is executed (here, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). ), And when the player participation type production is executed, it is possible to easily participate in the production, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 by the elevating mechanism including the operation button elevating drive motor 367 or the like according to the game state (lowering position). ) And the protruding position (elevating position) protruding upward from the retracting position, and at the retracting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371. Since the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be accepted. Therefore, the central pressing operation unit 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be pressed in the retracted position, there is an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b that does not move between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a with the momentum of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the momentum of pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. Can be made less likely to occur, and the player-participatory production can be surely enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Then, by moving to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of being greatly projected upward on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, so that the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303a The 303b can be made to stand out, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making people think that it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type production in which the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In this protruding position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically, for example. , When the central pressing operation unit 303a must be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed. When the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b must be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed or rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated, or when the rotation operation unit 302 must be rotated, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a It can be induced to press. As a result, the player can perform the pressing operation and the rotation operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation and the rotation operation. , It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the pressing operation and the rotation operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production in which the pressing operation and the rotation operation are performed. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

Further, it is equipped with a notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600, and in a player participation type effect, the player performs a central pressing operation in a protruding position where the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be pressed. If the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is mistakenly pressed when the unit 303a should be pressed, the center pressing operation unit 303a is notified by the notification means that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, so that the pressing operation is redone and the pressing operation is performed. The central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed can be reliably pressed, the player can enjoy the player participation type production, and the mistake in the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player loses by making a mistake. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable, to entertain the player-participatory production, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the player thinks that the central pressing operation unit 303a is being pressed correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type production despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion and the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the player's belief can be corrected, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is correctly pressed to participate in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game balls B for bulging forward and performing the game in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played. In the dish unit 200 provided with, an annular rotation operation unit 302 whose outer peripheral side surface, upper surface, and inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside and which can rotate around an axis extending vertically, and inside the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is arranged, and the rotation operation unit 302 is set according to a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation-type effect of rotating or pressing the pressing operation unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that the rotation operation or the pressing operation can be performed. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated from the rotation center. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the rotation operation is performed by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface by rubbing it in one direction by the player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when the player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at high speed is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above, so that the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 at a high speed. However, it is possible to entertain the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired at an early stage, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. It is possible to continuously entertain the player participation type production in which the operation unit 302 is rotated and operated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or with a light force, in the player participation type production, the player is required to perform various rotation operations. It is possible to request different rotation operations for each, and it is possible to present a wider variety of player participation type productions to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (composed of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) that the player touches and rotates is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) in an arc shape from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not get in the way even if the rotation operation is performed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, even from a direction other than the side (perpendicular direction to the rotation axis) of the rotation operation unit 302. Since it is easy to touch the outer peripheral side surface, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type production. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a large diameter, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle and a rotation operation as compared with a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since the movement of the player at the time of the above can be increased, the player can be made to feel that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit can be used in the player participation type production. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation of the 302 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the upper surface other than the outer peripheral side surface is exposed. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation such as the inner peripheral side surface, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved, and the game of rotating the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to make the participatory production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 302 is pressed. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are fully enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. Can be made to.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be grasped by the player. The appearance of the part 302 can be completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, and the like. As a result, for example, when the rotation operation unit is shaped like the steering wheel of an automobile, the player thinks that the rotation operation unit is gripped and operated at the moment when the player sees the rotation operation unit. When a player-participation-type production that requires various rotation operations is executed, it is not possible to perform a rotation operation different from that of the steering wheel-handling, and the player-participation-type production is performed. There is a risk that it will not be enjoyable and the interest in the game will be reduced. However, in this embodiment, since the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., the player is prejudiced about how to operate the rotation operation unit 302. It becomes possible to wipe it off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as desired by the player, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, so that the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that store the game balls B for bulging forward and performing the game in front of and below the game area 5a in which the game is played on the game board 5. On the upper surface of the dish unit 200 provided with the above, an annular rotation operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically, a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged, and when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect the rotation. , The rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). The part that meshes with) is only a part of the entire circumference of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decorative substrate By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of 352, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 are sufficiently (uniformly) luminescent and decorated. The rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. A plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted (turned on / off) in the same direction and at the same speed. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates while the specific parts of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are light-emittingly decorated. It is possible to make the illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to enjoy the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to the game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, to entertain the player-participatory production, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. A plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated together with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotation operation unit 302 is emitting light. , It can give a strong impact to the player, it can give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the light emitting decoration, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by reminiscent of it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted to emit light, and the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302 can be shown to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the annular rotation operation unit 302 is for the rotation operation, and it is easy for the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. At the same time, it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotatably attached around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation is performed when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the plate unit 200 has a configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340). Since the above can be compactly put together, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, it is provided with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotationally drives the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, the rotation that can be light-emitting and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around and emits light according to the game state. By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out below and in front of the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be applied. Can be made heavier. Further, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the operation ring drive motor 342 stops the rotation at each predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated by reciprocating the rotation operation unit 302 within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342. In this way, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operation feelings to the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to support a wider variety of player-participation-type productions. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing a game.

Further, since the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. Since the operation feeling can be supported by the light by sequentially emitting light in the direction or sequentially emitting light in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it becomes easier to secure a space below the rotation operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be decorated with light emission more uniformly and brightly, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a are each luminescent and decorated in good condition by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the central button decorative substrate 376. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from them, only the rotation operation unit 302 is light-emitting and decorated, only the pressing operation unit 303 is light-emitting and decorated, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is light-emitting and decorated, and the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Only the unit 303b can be light-emitting and decorated, so that the player can easily recognize the operation unit to be operated, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed.

Further, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light turns by sequentially emitting light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 Effect operation It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect of the ring decorative substrate 352 and the effect of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 in the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when urging the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 are sequentially emitted. , The light emitting decoration that the light rotates in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 also rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, or the player can use it. On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emitting decoration such as rotating the light in the opposite direction. In this way, since it is possible to show the player the effect of various light emission, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the central button decorative substrate 376 that illuminate and decorate the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, which are arranged concentrically, respectively. Therefore, for example, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the center button decorative substrate 376 to emit light in this order, or in the reverse order, the rotation operation unit 302 is provided. It is possible to show an effect of light that concentrates on the central pressing operation unit 303a and an effect of light that diffuses from the central pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, a wider variety of light emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to promote the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 provided with the game area 5a in which the game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. A door window 101a in which the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front is formed on the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is closed to the door frame 3, and a glass unit 160 provided with a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window 101a. The upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game ball B for playing a game are attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door frame base 101, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The provided dish unit 200 is attached.

Then, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two large-diameter upper plate center decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 having the same shape. The 453 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer circumference of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer peripheral pressing are performed. Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape as if a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is circular, and are provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 surround the outer circumference of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the outer circumference of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved, and the appealing power can be enhanced by directing the player's attention to the inside (game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine for playing by increasing the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape such that the cylindrical shape is an annular shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotation operation unit 302 are compared with the case where the rotation operation unit 302 has a flat disk shape. Since it is easy for the fingers to be applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. Further, since the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, the player can put his / her arm or finger on the upper center decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. In addition, the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation unit 302 makes it possible to prevent the player from getting too close to the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotation operation unit 302 for the arm or finger to move for the player to operate, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed, the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type production is executed, and the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Participatory production can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between the retracted position (lowering position) and the protruding position (rising position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of protruding greatly upward from the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, raise the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's attention is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 becomes more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved between the descending position and the ascending position according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, thereby prompting the player to operate the effect operating unit 301. It is possible to allow the player to accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is set to the descending position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation is performed. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a protrude upward from the rotation operation unit 302 when the pressing operation unit 303 becomes operable and the pressing operation unit 303 is moved from the lowering position to the ascending position. The rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative board 352, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate are provided. And the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are luminescently decorated to improve the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power by strongly attracting the interest of the player. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are appropriately emitted with light. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or can be guided from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. Depending on the state, the player can be made to operate the effect operation unit 301 or play the game in the game area 5a, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Although the pachinko machine 1 has been described above with reference to suitable forms, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its design can be changed in various ways.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end while the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is detected. Although not shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different production modes, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged. It is possible to perform a wider variety of player-participation-type productions, entertain the players, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the pressing operation unit 303 (center pressing operation unit 303a and outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the ascending position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the descending position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the ascending position, the downward movement may be restricted after the pressing operation unit 303 moves slightly downward from the ascending position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plate unit 200 having a rotation operation unit 302 provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 protruding forward is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is arranged inside the plate unit. At the same time, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to entertain the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a which is communicated with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting cylinder portion 43a is provided in the main body frame 4, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[Embodiment of the present invention]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 120. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment is mainly a modification of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1, the description thereof will be omitted except that it is related to the game board 5 in principle.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 112, the game board 5 of the embodiment has a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a on the front surface, a center member 2500 attached to the game panel 1100, and a rear of the game panel 1100. It consists of an effect unit 814 attached to the side.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 112, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 made of opaque plywood, a back decoration member 817 for applying decoration 816 for the background, a game area 5a, and a center member 2500. It is provided with a front component 1000 and a surrounding member 1000.

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of plywood as described above, and cells made of synthetic resin to be the first decorative surface 819 are attached to the entire front surface thereof, and the first decorative surface 819 is used as a background. Decorative 820a (a random array of boy's faces in the embodiment) is printed. Further, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is provided at a position substantially at the center of the base panel 1110.

[Back decoration member]
As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 114, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 115, and the cross-sectional view of FIGS. 108 and 109, the back side decorative member 817 for applying the decoration 816 for the background is the effect of the effect unit 814 described later. It is arranged on the back surface of the base panel 1110 via the support frame 852 (specifically, since it is screwed to the front surface of the effect support frame 852, it is morphologically integrated with the effect support frame 852). With the decoration 816a of the first decorative surface 819 on the front surface and the decoration 816 for the background having uniformity (including not only the uniformity of appearance but also the conceptual unity) (for example, the decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819). A second decorative surface 822 is formed which is connected to complete one character.). The second decorative surface 822 is provided with a perspective three-dimensional effect on the decoration 816 itself by arranging several blocks of plate pieces 822p at different positions in the front-rear direction.
The back side decorative member 817 includes an upper decorative member 817a, a lower decorative member 817b, a right decorative member 817c, and a left decorative member so as to correspond to the four sides of the through hole 1112 for mounting the center member 2500 of the base panel 1110. It is formed of 817d, and the second decorative surfaces 822 of the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c are arranged so as to face the inside of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d. The second decorative surface 822 is arranged so as to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. 108. Since the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is arranged to face the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 in this way, it is not visible to the player under normal conditions, but is shown in FIG. 114. When viewed from an angle, part of it can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the decoration 816 for the background extends to the invisible depth of the base panel 1110, so that the three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, not shown. A windmill, an obstacle nail, etc. that change the fall of the game ball are appropriately provided according to the content of the game, and an out ball opening 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest place.
Most of these members are made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Previous component]
As shown in FIG. 113, the front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that partitions the game area 5a and the upper outside of the center member 2500, and an inner rail 1001 that divides the game area 5a and the side and the lower side of the center member 2500. It has a frame shape having rails 1002, and a game ball launched from the launch rail 544 passes through the launch passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a or the upper part of the center member 2500. You will be guided.
The front component 1000 is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, and its surface can be seen through when it is installed on the base panel 1110. On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of the embodiment has the background decoration 820a over the entire front surface, so that the front component 1000 is hardly noticeable in the state of being camouflaged by the background decoration 820a, and the base panel All of the front of 1110 appears to be a large gaming area 5a. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine surrounded by the opaque front component, the visual effect as if the entire game panel 1100 is expanded to the game area 5a can be obtained.
In the embodiment, the decoration 820a for the background inside and outside the game area 5a is unified in design (including not only the uniformity of the appearance but also the ideological unity) so that the game area 5a can be visually expanded. However, the decoration 820a for the background of the portion corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component 1000 may be made into a different design with no uniformity. In such a case, since the decoration of the front component 1000 can be covered by printing the first decorative surface 819, it is not necessary to decorate the front component 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game panel 1100 of the embodiment is configured as described above, and is decorated for a background due to the difference in depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back surface of the game panel 1100. Since the perspective three-dimensional effect is generated in 816 and 20, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 is projected from the mounting flange portion 830 having a contour slightly larger than the contour of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 and the back side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to be loosely fitted in the through hole 1112. It has an inner frame portion 831 and an enclosure frame 832 projecting from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a, and the entire body is a transparent synthetic resin. Is formed of.
A tapered portion 833 that is inclined toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500. In the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 106, the tapered portion 833 of at least the portion that can be seen by the player during the game (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 of the upper half portion of the center member 2500) is the through hole 1112. The mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 are set to be shallowly hooked so as to be hooked on the edge of the base panel. By doing so, the light that illuminates the inside of the through hole 1112 changes like a prism through the tapered portion 833 of the mounting flange portion 830 and leaks to the outside. Therefore, the light leaking from the through hole 1112 is around the center member 2500. Can be easily and effectively decorated.

Further, the center member 2500 is a plate having an effect region 834 facing the drum 854 described later of the effect unit 814 and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a inside the enclosure frame 832. It has a decorative member 836 in the shape of a drum.

[Production area-Light guide plate unit]
A light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of the drum unit 855, which will be described later, is provided in the effect area 834 of the center member 2500. As shown in FIG. 110, the light guide plate unit 837 is obtained by fitting the light guide plate 842 into a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 incorporating a light emitting device 838 and a horizontal frame 840. The light emitting device 838 of the 839 and the horizontal frame 840 irradiates the light guide incident end surface of the light guide plate 842 with light to display a predetermined image in a dramatic manner.
The light guide plate 842 is fitted in a state in which rattling of about several mm (for example, 3 mm) occurs with respect to the display window 841. By doing so, even if the light guide plate 842 is thermally expanded, stress is less likely to be applied, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, for the same purpose, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in a state where a part of four sides is fixed with screws (not shown) or the like and the other sides are non-restraint and movable.

[Decorative members]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate projecting from the inside of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841, and has a game area on the surface. It has a decorative surface 835 having a height that is substantially flush with 5a. As shown in FIG. 111, the decorative surface 835 is consistent with the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (including not only the unification of appearance but also the unification of ideas). A background decoration 843 with (.) Is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 110, the difference in position and size between the effect area 834 and the through hole 1112 shown by the imaginary line in the figure (marginal). Can be filled in a natural way. That is, the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 naturally bites into the inside of the center member 2500. Further, although the decoration is used for uniformity, the light emitting decoration body may be arranged so as to straddle the outside and the inside of the center member 2500.
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decorative member 836 according to the size of the effect area 834, it is possible to correspond to many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500.
The decoration 843 drawn on the decorative surface 835 of the embodiment is drawn with ink having excellent light-shielding property, and therefore, the decoration of the second decorative surface 822 that can be seen through the non-decorative portion of the transparent decorative member 836. By contrasting with 816, the three-dimensional effect is further increased. Further, the light-shielding property of the decoration 843 also has an advantage that the light illuminated from the inside of the through hole 1112 is indirectly softened.
Further, in the embodiment, a decorative lamp 844H for decoration is provided on the upper front surface of the effect support frame 852 described later and above the drum 854 described later, and is located at a position overlapping the decorative lamp 844H of the decorative member 836. , A notch 845 for avoiding polymerization is formed. As a result, the light of the decorative lamp 844H is not likely to be reflected by the decorative member 836 and become difficult to see, so that the sharpness of the decorative lamp 844H is improved.

[Auxiliary items attached to the center member]
As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the center member 2500 enters from the stage shelf 2503, which causes the game ball to fall into the game area 5a while moving in the left-right direction, and the game area 5a, below the outside of the enclosure frame 832. It is integrally equipped with a so-called accessory consisting of a warp passage 847 that guides the game ball B to the stage shelf 2503. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly under the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a as described above, and if the game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, a prize can be won with a high probability.

Further, in the upper right outer half of the center member 2500 when facing the front of the enclosure frame 832, a right-handed guide passage 848 that guides a game ball that has jumped over its upper part along the outer rail 1001 to the lower right side of the game area 5a. Is provided. The right-handed guide passage 848 has a size approximately one game ball, and Kamaboko-shaped obstacle ridges 849 are alternately projected at substantially equal pitches on the right inner wall and the left inner wall of the front view in the passage. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right-handed guide passage 848 comes into contact with a large number of obstacle protrusions 849 and meanders, and is appropriate as if it falls while colliding with an obstacle nail in the game area 5a. It takes time to be guided to the lower right side of the game area 5a.

Further, in the lower right outer half of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, a second starting port 2004 in which the winning opening is opened and closed by the rotation of the opening / closing piece 850 is provided, and the second starting port 2004 and the right-handed strike are provided. A passage type gate portion 2003 is provided in the middle of the guide passage 848 in the vertical direction. This gate portion 2003 is installed in an extension portion 830a extending laterally from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500 in a lateral peninsula shape, and the rear portion is aligned with the extension portion 830a of the center member 2500 and the base panel 1110. It is housed in a bay-shaped notch 1112a carved in the through hole 1112 of the above. A gate portion 2003 (the same applies to other winning openings) is installed in the extension portion 830a protruding from the mounting flange portion 830 in a peninsula shape, and the bay-shaped cut portion 1112a is cut into the through hole 1112. Compared to the case where the gate part 2003, etc., which has its own mounting flange part around it in an independent form, is installed separately, the mounting flange part on the center member 2500 side is not required. The area of the veneer plate of the base panel 1110 in the portion where the game ball flows can be increased accordingly. It should be noted that the plywood has features such as easy driving and adjustment of nails and difficulty in pulling out the nails even after long-term use. Therefore, it is preferable to use plywood as much as possible for the portion where the obstacle nail is provided. The game ball that has entered the right-handed guide passage 848 is once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, it is placed in the area of the veneer plate where the obstacle nail is provided. It means to spit it out.

[Direction unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and is, for example, a display device 851 capable of displaying the result of a lottery regarding a big hit started by detecting a game ball by the first start port 2002 as game information. A frame-shaped effect support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type using the liquid crystal display device or the like or an actual operation type capable of displaying the game information by changing mechanical rotation / stop of a moving object, but the present embodiment The latter production type is used in.
As shown in FIGS. 116 to 120, the specific production type display device 851 has a plurality of sets of drum units 855 capable of rotating and moving the drum 854, which is a movable object, in a horizontal row (three sets in the embodiment). They are arranged side by side and their upper and lower parts are fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856.

[Drum unit]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 118, each drum unit 855 includes a laterally cylindrical drum 854, a rotation drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854 in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure, and a rotation drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854. It is roughly composed of a moving drive device 858 that moves the drum 854 in the vertical direction, and a lighting member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify the game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and patterns are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the peripheral surface.
The rotary drive device 857 that rotates the drum 854 has a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854, and is arranged at the center of the drum 854 and gradually expands in diameter toward the ring member 860. Further, a cone-shaped cylindrical center member 861 that opens outward on the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the center member 861, and an electric motor that is directly connected to the center member 861. By rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863, which is composed of the motor 863, the central member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 are integrally rotated or stopped.

The rotary drive device 857 is provided with an air cooling means for cooling the inside of the drum 854 by passing air through it. That is, the air-cooling means includes a sirocco fan-shaped intake wing piece 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and a propeller fan-shaped exhaust wing piece 865 formed on the connecting member 862. By rotating in the indicated direction, air is sucked in from the opening of the central member 861 and discharged to the space between the outside of the central member 861 and the inside of the drum 854 in the same way as a sirocco fan, and the air guided to this space is further discharged to the propeller fan. It is discharged to the outside of the drum 854 from between the connecting member 862 and the connecting member 862 in the same manner as described above. Therefore, a U-turn-shaped airflow in which the intake air and the exhaust air are opposite to each other is generated inside and outside the central member 861 of the drum 854, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

The moving drive device 858 that moves the drum 854 in the vertical direction together with the rotary drive device 857 can slide the electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855, the disk-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the lighting member 859, and the support substrate 866 up and down. A guide shaft 867 that supports the guide shaft 867, a male screw-shaped drive shaft 868 that is erected in parallel with the guide shaft 867, an upper and lower bearing base 869 that supports the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing base. It consists of an elevating motor 870 for the drive shaft 868 attached to the upper part of the 869.
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the elevating motor 870, the support substrate 866 rises or falls along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, whereby the drum 854 rises together with the rotation drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 120. Or it descends as shown in the imaginary line in the figure. The drum 854 is normally stopped at a substantially intermediate position in the movable range (hereinafter, referred to as a "reference position"), and from this state, all the drums 854 may be moved up and down all at once, or each drum 854 may be moved up and down. May be moved up and down separately. Further, when the drum 854 is in the highest or lowest position, a part of the drum 854 is removed from the display window 841 and cannot be seen as shown in FIG. 120, but even in that case, the part for displaying the game information is still present. It is designed to exist within the frame of the display window 841.

By the way, in the moving drive device 858 of the embodiment, the drum 854 can be moved only in the vertical direction. For example, another set of a combination of a drive shaft 868, a guide shaft 867, a bearing base 869, and a support substrate 866 is added. Then the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are rotated in a horizontal direction, and it is incorporated between the original support board 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, two bearing bases added to the original support board 866. The 869 may be fixed side by side, the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 may be passed sideways, and the electric motor 863 may be attached to a new support substrate 866 supported by the sideways drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the production by the drum 854 is remarkably improved, and the members that interfere with the up and down movement are temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. Will also be possible.

Further, the display device 851 of the embodiment is provided with linear illuminations 871a to 871d in the shape of vertical bars for front view between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855. The linear illuminations 871a to 871d are light emitters such as a cold cathode fluorescent lamp, and are formed so as to be curved in an arc shape (bow shape) toward the front surface (player), but are formed at both ends of the three drums 854. The degree of bending of the positional linear illuminations 871a and 871d is set more gently than the degree of bending of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, and the bending degree of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c between the drums 854 is further set. Are installed so as to protrude toward the player side from the linear lights 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854. As a result, it is possible to give a curved three-dimensional effect to the front surface of the drum 854 with the linear illuminations 871a to 871d lit.

The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear surface side by the effect support frame 852 described in detail below, and all the drums 854 located in the reference position in the front view in the frame of the display window 841 of the center member 2500. Is designed to fit. That is, the vertical width of the display window 841 is larger than the vertical width of the movable drum 854 (diameter of the drum 854), and therefore, the portion showing the game information in front of the stopped drum 854 from the display window 841. (The winning or losing of the lottery result is displayed by the combination of the numbers or symbols in this part.) In addition, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 is visible to the player. By seeing at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 from the display window 841 in this way, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the drum 854 exists in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 as described above, the main control board 1310 determines a winning or losing lottery. Is performed, and the lottery result is a combination of the symbols of the drum 854 stopped in the frame of the display window 841 after a production operation for a certain period of time due to a mechanical change in which the rotation and the vertical movement of the drum 854 are appropriately combined. Is displayed. If the lottery result is a big hit, there is a benefit that a large amount of prizes can be easily entered into the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined condition. Of course, the effect operation of the display device 851 may be any.

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 is in the form of a frame having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851, a back-side decorative member 817 having a second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround the four sides of the display device 851. Further, the effect support frame 852 is provided with a decorative lamp 844H for decoration located above the drum 854 at the upper part of the front surface as described above, but further, the lower side of the drum 854 is provided at the lower part of the front surface of the effect support frame 852. A decorative lamp 844L for decoration located in is provided. By blinking the upper and lower decorative lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, a noteworthy target among a plurality of drums 854 can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851, and is provided with a fan 873 for heat dissipation and a ventilation hole 874 on both side surfaces as shown in FIG. 119. The rear surface is also provided with a ventilation hole 874 for heat dissipation. Further, above and below the rear cover 853, effect lighting 875 that irradiates light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided, and the outline of the drum 854 is illuminated by the illumination from the rear side. There is. At least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 is dark (specifically, black) in order to enhance the effect of the light produced by the effect lighting 875. Further, the effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853, and the light emitting body 876 such as an LED faces the rear cover 853 from there. Further, a half mirror 877 is provided in the portion of the rear cover 853 corresponding to the effect lighting 875 so that the rear surface side of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface in the state where the effect lighting 875 is OFF. As a result, the rear side of the drum 854 is also produced gorgeously.

The above embodiment also includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical Thought 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming panel having a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down.
A first decorative surface formed on the front surface of the game panel for decorating the background, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second decorative surface for decorating a background formed at a position recessed from the front surface of the gaming panel.

[Technical Thought 2]
A display device that displays game information by moving movable objects,
It is provided with a display window that makes it possible to recognize the existence of the display device.
A gaming machine in which a player is made to recognize game information by the movable body that can be recognized through the display window.
The display window is a gaming machine characterized in that, in addition to a portion displaying game information of the movable object, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object is formed so as to be visible to the player.

The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but of course, the embodiment can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (reel or a reel) using a game medal. It can also be applied to slot machines that rotate reels).

Further, in the embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotary drive device 857 and the elevating motor 870 of the mobile drive device 858 are oriented in different directions. Specifically, the output shaft of the electric motor 863 is horizontal with the same horizontal axis as the rotation axis of the drum 854. On the other hand, the elevating motor 870 has a different orientation such that its output shaft is perpendicular to the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, but the orientation of the electric motor 863 and the elevating motor 870. Can be aligned in the same way. However, when the electric motor 863 and the elevating motor 870 are set in different directions as in the embodiment, the motor that causes a trouble in either the rotating operation or the elevating operation of the drum 854 is identified and dealt with. It is excellent in that it can be done quickly.

Further, in the embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example, but a transparent synthetic resin base panel 1110 may be used.
Further, in the embodiment, the background decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 are used as patterns for printing or the like, but they may be decorated with a light emitting body such as an LED.

1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine)
5a ... Game area 832 ... Enclosure frame 834 ... Production area 835 ... Decorative surface 836 ... Decorative member 1100 ... Game panel 1112 ... Through hole 2500 ... Center member

Claims (1)

Center member is attached to the gaming panel, a game machine for performing those Rika whether the lottery based on it has been run through a predetermined winning opening,
The center member
From the section that divides the game area where the game medium can roll and the non-game area where the game medium cannot roll, the stage shelf that allows the game medium to fall toward the predetermined winning opening, and the section. A specific portion extending toward the non-gaming area is provided.
The surface of the game panel and the surface of the specific portion are substantially flush with each other, and the design of the game panel composed of the substantially flush surface and the design of the specific portion are designed to have uniformity.
A back side decorative member with a predetermined decoration is provided on the back side of the game panel, and the predetermined decoration is visible through a game area in which the game medium can be rolled.
A movable body that can move from the first position to the second position is provided, and even if the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, what is the design that is substantially flush with each other? It is designed so that it does not overlap,
Apart from the stage shelf, there is a flow path inside the outer circumference of the center member through which the game medium can roll, and the flow path is made invisible by the game medium that has entered the flow path. A gaming machine characterized in that the design of the back portion of the machine is also designed to have the same uniformity.

Images